JP6918767B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set set value. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be appropriately executed. ..

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a setting confirmation operation.

(A) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process) capable of setting a setting value related to a probability of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). ,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process) that can control the setting value set by the setting means to a setting confirmation state that can be confirmed, and
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
A normal variable time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring a normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information, and
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result, the normal variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B) in which the game medium can pass through the specific area (for example, the open state) and the normal variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B).
An ordinary variable time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a passable period during which the ordinary variable means can pass,
A special variable display means (for example, a CPU 103 that clocks with a special figure fluctuation time timer) capable of variablely displaying special identification information (for example, a special symbol) and displaying a variable display result,
A special variable display timing means (for example, CPU 103) that measures a special variable display period for variable display of special identification information, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state has ended, and
A notification timing means for measuring the notification period in which the notification effect is executed is provided.
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state even when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing that can execute the processing related to the game is executed.
The interrupt process is executed when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped when the normal variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the normal symbol). Stops the timekeeping of the normal map fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the passable period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state ends. The timekeeping of the passable period is interrupted until the time is completed, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timekeeping of the passable period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is in the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state). Stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped when the special variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the special symbol). Stops the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
The setting confirmation state ends when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the notification period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state. The timing of the notification period is interrupted until, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timing of the notification period is restarted. According to this feature, the setting confirmation work can be suitably executed when the setting confirmation is desired to be performed immediately.
(1) Further, the other gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F).
See state control means (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, FIG. 10-2) for controlling one of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state and probable change state) having different advantages for the player. )When,
A motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, back motion, specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) and the promotion notification means for prompting the player to perform an operation (for example, a specific operation) detected by the operation detection means.
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, a common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, a control period of a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
A suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing a suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation in 48FS024 of FIG. 10-4 by the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion means is a specific period during which the player can specify the end of the common effect (for example, a period during which the result screen is displayed and a valid period of t2 to t4 in FIG. 10-9). In the above, it is possible to suggest a state in the predetermined period based on the fact that the player's motion (for example, back motion) is detected by the motion detecting means without performing the promotion notification (for example, FIG. 10-). 4, see Fig. 10-9),
Moreover,
Signal generation means (test signal processing, etc.) for generating test signals (test signals A to G, etc.) to be output to the outside of the gaming machine, and
Granting means for granting the game medium based on the winning of the game medium (game ball, etc.) (processing in which the CPU 103 pays out the game ball (prize ball), etc.)
The ratio of the number of game media (number of prize balls in the normal state, etc.) given by the granting means to the number of game media (number of balls launched in the normal state, etc.) fired in the game area in a predetermined state (normal state base, etc.) Calculation means (display monitor processing, etc.) for calculating specific information (normal state base, data processed from normal state base, etc.)
It is provided with a display means (display monitor 207SG029 or the like) capable of displaying the specific information in the predetermined state calculated by the calculation means.
The calculation means can specify the predetermined state based on the information (test flags A to G, etc.) used by the signal generation means for generating the test signal that can specify the game state among the test signals. (As shown in FIG. 12-2, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the test flags A to G).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to such a configuration, by using the information used for generating the test signal for specifying the gaming state, it is possible to display the specific information regarding the number of game media given.

(2) A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature portion 48F).
An advantageous state control means (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, FIG. 5 by the CPU 103) that controls a state different from the advantageous state but one of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state and probable change state) having different advantages for the player. Special symbol process processing, see Fig. 10-2) and
A motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, back motion, specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) and the promotion notification means for prompting the player to perform an operation (for example, a specific operation) detected by the operation detection means.
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, a common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, a control period of a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
A suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing a jackpot suggestion effect at 48FS083 in FIG. 10-7 by the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
In the advantageous state (for example, the second special figure big hit game state) controlled in the predetermined period, the suggestion means moves the player (for example, back action) by the motion detecting means without performing the promotion notification. ) Can be suggested based on the detection of) (see, for example, FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11).
Moreover,
Signal generation means (test signal processing, etc.) for generating test signals (test signals A to G, etc.) to be output to the outside of the gaming machine, and
Granting means for granting the game medium based on the winning of the game medium (game ball, etc.) (processing in which the CPU 103 pays out the game ball (prize ball), etc.)
The ratio of the number of game media (number of prize balls in the normal state, etc.) given by the granting means to the number of game media (number of balls launched in the normal state, etc.) fired in the game area in a predetermined state (normal state base, etc.) Calculation means (display monitor processing, etc.) for calculating specific information (normal state base, data processed from normal state base, etc.)
It is provided with a display means (display monitor 207SG029 or the like) capable of displaying the specific information in the predetermined state calculated by the calculation means.
The calculation means can specify the predetermined state based on the information (test flags A to G, etc.) used by the signal generation means for generating the test signal that can specify the game state among the test signals. (As shown in FIG. 12-2, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the test flags A to G).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to such a configuration, by using the information used for generating the test signal for specifying the gaming state, it is possible to display the specific information regarding the number of game media given.

(3) A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature portion 48F).
An advantageous state control means (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, FIG. 5 by the CPU 103) that controls a state different from the advantageous state but one of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state and probable change state) having different advantages for the player. Special symbol process processing, see Fig. 10-2) and
A motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, back motion, specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) and the promotion notification means for prompting the player to perform an operation (for example, a specific operation) detected by the operation detection means.
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, a common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, a control period of a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
Suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing a suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation at 48F024 in FIG. 10-4 by the effect control CPU 120, and a suggestion effect during a big hit at 48FS083 in FIG. 10-7. With the process to be executed)
The suggestion means
During the specific period in which the player can specify the end of the common effect (for example, the period during which the result screen is displayed and the valid period of t2 to t4 in FIG. 10-9), the promotion notification is given. Based on the fact that the player's motion (for example, back motion) is detected by the motion detecting means, the first suggestion suggesting the state in the predetermined period is made (for example, FIG. 10-4, FIG. (See Fig. 10-9),
In the advantageous state (for example, the second special figure big hit game state) controlled in the predetermined period, the player's motion (for example, back motion) is detected by the motion detecting means without performing the promotion notification. Based on this, a second suggestion suggesting the state in the predetermined period is made (see, for example, FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above
The player's motion (for example, back motion) detected by the motion detecting means when the first suggestion is made, and the player's motion detected by the motion detecting means when the second suggestion is made. (For example, the back operation) has the same operation content (for example, long press of the trigger button of the stick controller 31A).

According to such a configuration, the operation content for state suggestion does not change regardless of the situation when the player causes the gaming machine to suggest the state, so that the operation for suggesting the state becomes complicated. This can be prevented as much as possible.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above
The execution mode of the first suggestion (for example, the execution pattern of the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation) and the execution mode of the second suggestion (for example, the execution pattern of the suggestion effect during the big hit) are some modes (for example, the speaker). While the 8L and 8R audio outputs are different, other aspects (for example, the lighting color of the board lamp 48F050) are common (see, for example, FIG. 10-8).

According to such a configuration, a part of the execution mode of the state suggestion differs depending on the situation when the player causes the gaming machine to suggest the state. Therefore, the state suggestion is appropriately performed according to the situation. be able to.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above
The suggestion means
When performing the first suggestion (for example, suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation), the first suggestion unit (for example, board lamp 48F050) is used, but the second suggestion portion (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) is not used (for example, speakers 8L, 8R). For example, see FIGS. 10-8 (A) and 10-9),
When performing the second suggestion (for example, suggestion effect during big hit), the first suggestion part (for example, board lamp 48F050) and the second suggestion part (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) are used (for example, FIG. 10-8 (for example, FIG. 10-8). B), see Fig. 10-11).

According to such a configuration, the number of suggestion parts used for the state suggestion differs depending on the situation when the player causes the gaming machine to suggest the state. Therefore, the state suggestion is appropriately made according to the situation. It can be carried out.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) and (3) to (6) above,
When the control to the advantageous state is determined in the specific period (for example, when the jackpot fluctuates) and the player's motion (for example, back motion) is detected by the motion detecting means in the specific period, Advantageous notification means for notifying control of the advantageous state in a mode different from the execution mode of the suggestion by the suggestion means (for example, a process of executing a big hit effect during back operation at 48FS025 in FIG. 10-4 by the effect control CPU 120). (See, for example, FIG. 10-10).

According to such a configuration, when the control to the advantageous state is determined, the player performs an action for suggesting the state to notify the control to the advantageous state, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (2) to (7) above,
Further provided with a common effect determining means (for example, a process of determining a common effect based on the player's selection by the effect control CPU 120) for determining the type of the common effect by the player's selection.
Among the common effects, the above suggestion occurs when the first common effect (for example, common effect A) is determined by the common effect determining means and when the second common effect (for example, common effect B) is determined. While some aspects (for example, the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R) are different in the suggestion by the means, other aspects (for example, the lighting color of the board lamp 48F050) are common (see, for example, FIG. 10-8 (B)). ).

According to such a configuration, since a part of the execution mode of the state suggestion is different depending on the type of the common effect selected by the player, the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 9 to 11. Conventionally, in order to control the gambling of a gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-361, it is obtained during operation of a character such as opening a large winning opening for the total number of acquired balls. The number of acquired balls is calculated as the ratio of the acquired balls, and the number of acquired balls is calculated based on the number of acquired balls obtained for each gaming state such as during a normal game with respect to the number of launched balls. There was something to display on the vessel. It is disclosed that a signal indicating a gaming state or the like is set as a test signal to be output to an inspection device connected to the gaming machine. In this gaming machine, a test signal indicating a gaming state is set, but for example, the gaming state is set using the test signal in order to display specific information regarding the number of acquired balls, which is the number of gaming media given to the player. Nothing is specified, and if a new process is added to specify the gaming state, there is a risk that the program capacity related to the process will increase. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the program capacity from increasing.

(9) In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) capable of launching a gaming medium into the gaming area
A state control means (CPU103, etc.) capable of controlling any of a plurality of types of gaming states including a predetermined state (normal state, etc.), and
Signal generation means (test signal processing, etc.) for generating test signals (test signals A to G, etc.) to be output to the outside of the gaming machine, and
Granting means for granting the game medium based on the winning of the game medium (game ball, etc.) (processing in which the CPU 103 pays out the game ball (prize ball), etc.)
The ratio of the number of game media (number of prize balls in the normal state, etc.) given by the granting means to the number of game media (number of balls launched in the normal state, etc.) fired in the game area in the predetermined state (normal state base, etc.) ), A calculation means (display monitor processing, etc.) for calculating specific information (normal state base, data processed from the normal state base, etc.),
It is provided with a display means (display monitor 207SG029 or the like) capable of displaying the specific information in the predetermined state calculated by the calculation means.
The calculation means can specify the predetermined state based on the information (test flags A to G, etc.) used by the signal generation means for generating the test signal that can specify the game state among the test signals. (As shown in FIG. 12-2, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the test flags A to G).

According to such a configuration, by using the information used for generating the test signal for specifying the gaming state, it is possible to display the specific information regarding the number of game media given.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9) above
The calculation means is
The predetermined number of shots (the number of balls fired in the normal state, etc.), which is the number of game media fired in the game area in the predetermined state, and the total number of shots, which is the number of game media fired in the game area in all the game states (the number of balls fired in the normal state, etc.). (Total number of launch balls, etc.) and updated
When the gaming state is not the predetermined state, the predetermined number of shots is not updated, while the total number of shots is updated (as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), other than the normal state, the normal state shots are fired. The number of balls is not updated, but the total number of launched balls is updated).

According to such a configuration, the total number of shots for calculating the specific information in all the gaming states and the predetermined number of shots for calculating the specific information in the predetermined state can be accurately calculated. Specific information for each gaming state can be calculated.

(11) In the gaming machines (9) to (10) above,
The signal generation means
Execute control instructions programmatically to generate test signals and
When generating a test signal, a specific control command (specific command, etc.) is not executed (as shown in FIG. 12-2, the specific command is not executed in the test signal processing).

According to such a configuration, the program can be executed stably.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display device when it recovers from the power failure during setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing in a feature part 10F. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the operation-related setting process during variable display executed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display middle-back motion detection processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the specific motion detection process during variable display executed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the operation-related setting process during a big hit executed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit middle-back operation detection process executed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a figure which shows the table for determining the execution pattern of the suggestion effect in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the effect when the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 48F is back-operated during the 100th change of time saving and electric support (when the loss fluctuates). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the effect when the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 48F is back-operated during the 100th change of a time saving and electric support (when a big hit fluctuates). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the effect at the time of the back operation in the 2nd special figure big hit game state in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a figure which shows the table for determining the execution pattern of the setting suggestion in the pachinko game machine of the modified example which concerns on the feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in the operation of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of a set value and the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the number of executions of a 1st movable body initialization process and a 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. (A) is a diagram for explaining a method of calculating a base value, and (B) is a diagram for explaining data update for each gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of determining whether or not a game state is a normal state based on a test signal flag. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of determining whether or not a game state is a normal state based on a special figure process flag and the like.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko game machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on / off, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of Feature 207SG of the Present Embodiment]
In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to suitably notify the setting state. There was a problem. A gaming machine according to the invention 207SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Further, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to preferably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. The gaming machine according to the invention 208SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Further, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming a set value are used. There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are provided individually. The gaming machine according to the invention 209SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the invention 207SG, the invention 208SG, and the invention 209SG are represented by the feature unit 207SG. The feature unit 207SG is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the game board. The right side of the image display device 5 in No. 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-7, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 207SG003 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 207SG201, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st reserved display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 207SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 207SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 207SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 207SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 207SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variation display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

Regarding the case where the variation display result is a big hit in the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type to display the variation display result. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variation display result is a big hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the variation with two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 207SG025A and second hold display 207SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 207SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 due to the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position, respectively, during variable display or the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332, which can detect the presence of the object, is connected to the origin detection sensor 207SG332.

FIG. 8-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the determination result (pre-determination result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ), And different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a set value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-9, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-10 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set so that the jackpot expectation that the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-10, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. If the set value is 3 as the fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to be a fluctuation pattern that causes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-13, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -11 (C), the display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), and the display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-12 (B). Set value 5), display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 8-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), FIG. 8-13 ( In addition to the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal map display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of the "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and the setting Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

Further, in each display result judgment table, the judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C), regardless of the gaming state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is set to 1/200. It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value is shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12. When any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. 8-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) is the probability (ratio) of a big hit and a small hit. Indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 has the display results shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). It is designed to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the judgment table, but whether the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are separately provided for each set value and the variation display result is the big hit. Whether or not it is a small hit may be individually determined.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-13 (A) and 8-13 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-13 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, in FIG. 8-13 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-14. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 775 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 120 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 290 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and is lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the MR3 determination value ranges from 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

In this way, when the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are between the set values. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α is illustrated. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The fluctuation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-16 (A) to 8-16 (C), changes are made using a change pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss is set regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rate at which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is the fluctuation of the super reach loss regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed by a pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). NS. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number of stored data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map reservation storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (B) and 8-17 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear process for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa010 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed) ( 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGsa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGsa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of the 207SGSa032-207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 8-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of 207SGSa042 and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear process ends.

As shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) store game information including special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be prompted to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

The feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing a set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa052, FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (reset the set value to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any of 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the execution of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 207SGsa062 to 207SGsa065. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGsa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. When the value of the set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa102, FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power supply disconnection detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa107; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the lock switch 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B All segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGsa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command (207SGSa115) to the effect control board 12, and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display 207SG131 are lit, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the holding display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., can see the pachinko game machine 1 changing the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which only the LED of 1 is lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-6. As long as it does not correspond to either B or the jackpot C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is changed in set value. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By turning on the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A) to 8-25 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. (Clear switch is OFF) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A), 8-25 (B), and 8-25 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is first turned off by turning off the power. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the CPU 103 executed the same power failure detection process (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Later, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

The invention 207SG has been described above by exemplifying the feature portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 207SG is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22).
In the set state, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
According to this feature, the information display unit that executes the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified that the information display unit is in the set state, so that suitable notification can be performed.

Further, the invention 208SG has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 208SG is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B)). If an error occurs in excess of the set value, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
According to this feature, in the variable display area where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed, the display notifies that a predetermined error has occurred even if a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, the invention 209SG has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 209SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play a game using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value adding means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 8-17 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value, so that it is not necessary to individually provide the display means for displaying the set value information. , The cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Although the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the like. Although the embodiment composed of the design display 207SG020, the general drawing hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the case where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state) is the first. Although an embodiment in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. It is possible to inform the existence in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on, thereby making the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. 1 Display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B as a display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays a variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state. If the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to light a part of all the segments constituting the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. An embodiment of lighting of one segment, blinking of all segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. For blinking of all segments to be performed, it may not be executed or only a part of the blinking may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and unless it is a combination corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited, and for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. The machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or a temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the embodiment for determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The present invention illustrates a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game. Is not limited to this, but is limited to the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can be notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The present invention illustrates a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. , Actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An embodiment has been exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator A description indicating that the 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are lit or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistaken for a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

[Explanation of feature 10F]
In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, pachinko gaming machines that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. there were. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference). However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. The gaming machines according to the inventions 10F, 11F, 12F, and 13F that solve such problems are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the invention 10F, the invention 11F, the invention 12F, and the invention 13F will be represented as the feature unit 10F. The feature unit 10F is characterized in that the game stop start process and the game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above. The feature unit 10F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above together with the feature unit 207SG.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 9-1, the same processing as in FIG. 8-22 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 8-20, the RAM clear process was executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process (207SGa013b), no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in the 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. The feature unit 10F will be described on the premise that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa051). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 8-22 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 8-22 is executed.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 9-2, the same processing as in FIG. 8-23 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa101). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 8-23 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 8-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from the opening state to the closing state of the large winning opening door. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-cover opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is controlled in the open state and the closed state, and is provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change. In the V probability variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round among the plurality of rounds. The area where the V-cover is open is called the V-winning area. The CPU 103 uses a V-cover opening time timer to measure the time from when the V-cover is opened to when it is closed. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines a game ball that has passed a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the open state to the closed state. A game ball that has passed the switch) is also judged to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is determined to be valid by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses a fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

As other timers other than the above-mentioned timers, the CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating in the game stop start process (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not running (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the V-cover opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is operating (10FS018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not operating (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is operating (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timer is not running (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. Due to the other processing (10FS021), various processings are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop end process in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-cover opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V-cover opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS030, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether or not the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other timer that is stopped is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the other timer is not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other processing (10FS041), various processings are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the feature part 10F)
As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timekeeping of the inter-round interval period timer period is restarted based on the end. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the interval period between rounds in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the time counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the valid period of the electric chew open time timer. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The time counting of the period of the variable stop period timer is stopped, and the time counting of the period of the special figure variable stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding a modified example of the gaming machine related to the feature section 10F)
Although the feature portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 10F will be described below.

A gaming machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol (so-called first-class gaming machine) has been described, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the gaming area has been described. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball winning (V-winning) in the special winning opening (V winning opening), and first and second types It may be applied to a gaming machine (a type-two type mixer) in which the above is combined. When the start winning prize to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is accepted by a special variable winning ball device for small hits in a small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, it is variable for big hits. The second-class jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also determined to be a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is completed. , The timekeeping of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the same control may be executed even in the setting change state. good. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when the player is in a favorable state, and the various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timekeeping.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a jackpot display result or a missed display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player for the jackpot display result which is advantageous for the player, but the timer is not disadvantageous to the player for the off display result. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

The invention 10F has been described above by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 10F is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state)
According to this feature, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, the invention 11F has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 11F is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state where the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state)
According to this feature, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

Further, the invention 12F has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 12F is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. (Resumes the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state)
According to this feature, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the information from being lost.

Further, the invention 13F has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 13F is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. (Resumes the timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state)
According to this feature, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

[Explanation of feature 48F]
In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines that can be controlled into a plurality of types of states and that perform a common effect common to the plurality of types of states regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled (for example). , JP-A-2010-5141). In this gaming machine, while executing an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operation buttons, when the operation buttons are operated by the player, the state of being controlled is suggested, and the operation is indicated. The execution ratio of the effect is designed to be different depending on the state under control. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the player can predict the state of being controlled to some extent without operating the operation buttons by using the execution frequency of the operation effect as a clue, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game. The gaming machine according to the invention 48F that solves such a problem is proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machine according to the invention 48F will be represented as the feature section 48F. The feature portion 48F can be applied to the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 together with the feature portion 10F and the feature portion 207SG.

(Specifications of pachinko gaming machine related to feature 48F)
FIG. 10-1 is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine are set so that the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/320, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/55, and the probability variation ratio is 75%. There is. The spec values shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) are examples and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change or the time of probability change may be changeable according to the set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the pachinko gaming machine, the jackpot that occurs in the first special figure game using the first special figure (for example, the special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A described above). The types (hereinafter referred to as "first special figure jackpot") include jackpot types A to D. The jackpot type A is a jackpot type corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is 7 symbols aligned (777). The jackpot type B is a jackpot type corresponding to a 3R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an odd number of symbols other than the 7 symbols (for example, 333). The jackpot type C is a jackpot type corresponding to a 3R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbols are even-numbered symbols (for example, 222). The jackpot type D is a jackpot type corresponding to the 3R normal jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an even numbered symbol as in the jackpot type C (for example, 222).

As described above, all of the jackpot types A to C correspond to the probability variation jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the high accuracy and high base state. In the jackpot types A to C, the probability variation state after the jackpot ends in a so-called number cut, and the number of fluctuations in the probability variation state (hereinafter, referred to as "ST (special time) number of times") is set to 100 times. On the other hand, the jackpot type D usually corresponds to a jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot is a low accuracy and high base state.

In all of the jackpot types A to D, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled to the time saving state, and the number of fluctuations in the time saving state is set to 100 times. Furthermore, in all of the jackpot types A to D, in the time saving state after the jackpot, the opening frequency and the number of opening times of the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called electric tulip) are increased or the opening time of one time is lengthened. The so-called "electric tulip support control" (hereinafter referred to as "electric support") is performed to facilitate the winning of the special variable winning ball device 7. In all of the jackpot types A to D, the number of fluctuations in which electric support is performed after the jackpot is also set to 100 times.

Of the jackpot types A to D, the jackpot type A is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the other jackpot types B to D in that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is large, and the ratio selected at the time of a jackpot is the jackpot type A to. It is the lowest 2% of D. In the jackpot type C and the jackpot type D, the ratio selected at the time of the jackpot is the same, and the ratio is 25%. The ratio value shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) is an example and can be changed as appropriate. However, the jackpot type A has a lower selection ratio than the other jackpot types B to D, and the jackpot type C and the jackpot type C and the jackpot. It is preferable that the selection ratio is the same as that of the type D.

Here, in the jackpot type C and the jackpot type D, the jackpot symbols are both the same even-numbered symbols, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also the same 3R, and the time saving state and the control to the electric support are also both. The same 100 times. Further, as will be described later, regardless of whether the jackpot type C or the jackpot type D is determined, the effect in the game state after the jackpot is common. That is, the jackpot type C and the jackpot type D differ only depending on whether or not the internal state changes after the jackpot game state, and there is no difference in appearance from the other players. For this reason, when a jackpot is determined to be either a jackpot type C or a jackpot type D and a jackpot occurs, it is extremely difficult for the player to determine whether the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), in the pachinko gaming machine, the jackpot that occurs in the second special figure game using the second special figure (for example, the special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B described above). The types (hereinafter referred to as "second special figure jackpot") include jackpot types E to H. The jackpot type E is a jackpot type corresponding to a 16R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is a set of 7 symbols (777). The jackpot type F is a jackpot type corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an odd numbered symbol other than the 7 symbols (for example, 333). The jackpot type G is a jackpot type corresponding to a 3R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbols are even-numbered symbols (for example, 222). The jackpot type H is a jackpot type corresponding to the 3R normal jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an even numbered symbol as in the jackpot type G (for example, 222).

As described above, the jackpot types E to H all correspond to the probability variation jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the high probability high base state. In the jackpot types E to G, the number of STs in the probability change state after the jackpot is set to 100 times. On the other hand, the jackpot type H usually corresponds to a jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot is a low accuracy and high base state.

In all of the jackpot types E to H, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled to the time saving state, but the number of fluctuations in the time saving state is set to 100 times, and the number of fluctuations in which the electric support is performed is also set to 100 times. There is.

Of the jackpot types E to H, the jackpot type E is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the other jackpot types F to H in that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is large, and the ratio selected at the time of jackpot is the jackpot type E to. It is the highest 50% of H. The ratio value shown in FIG. 10-1 (C) is an example and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the selection ratio may be the same for the jackpot type G and the jackpot type H.

Here, in the jackpot type G and the jackpot type H, the jackpot symbols are both the same even-numbered symbols, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also the same 3R, and the time saving state and the control to the electric support are also both. The same 100 times. Further, as will be described later, regardless of whether the jackpot type G or the jackpot type H is determined, the effect in the game state after the jackpot is common. That is, the jackpot type G and the jackpot type H differ only depending on whether or not the internal state changes after the jackpot game state, and there is no difference in appearance from the other players. For this reason, when a jackpot is determined to be either a jackpot type G or a jackpot type H and a jackpot occurs, it is extremely difficult for the player to determine whether the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot.

(Transition of game state)
FIG. 10-2 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F, the gaming states controlled by the CPU 103 include a normal state, a first special figure jackpot gaming state, a high accuracy high base state, and a low. The accuracy base state and the second special figure jackpot game state are included.

When the first special figure jackpot occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to the first special figure jackpot game state. The first special figure jackpot game state is controlled by the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the first special figure jackpot that has occurred (various types in FIG. 10-1 (B)), during which the player strikes right. Allows the game ball to enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

After the first special figure big hit game state is completed, the state shifts to the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state according to the type of the generated first special figure big hit. Specifically, when the generated first special figure jackpot is either an 8R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type A, a 3R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type B, or a 3R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type C. Is controlled to a high accuracy and high base state. On the other hand, when the generated first special figure jackpot is a 3R normal jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type D, it is controlled to a low accuracy and high base state.

In both the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, the effect (background effect, reach effect, notice effect, etc.) can be selected by the player, and the effect that can be selected by the player is high-accuracy. It is common to the high base state and the low accuracy high base state. That is, since the effect performed in the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state are common, the player can determine which of the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state is. It is extremely difficult to distinguish the production from the clues. In the present embodiment, as a common effect, a common effect A in which a male character appears as the main character and a common effect B in which a female character appears as the main character are provided, and the player selects one of the effects. It is possible.

In the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the player can start the second special figure game by hitting right. When the second special figure game is started and the second special figure big hit occurs in the second special figure game, the state shifts to the second special figure big hit game state. The second special figure jackpot game state is controlled by the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the second special figure jackpot that has occurred (various types in FIG. 10-1 (C)), during which the player strikes right. Allows the game ball to enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

After the second special figure jackpot game state is completed, the state shifts to the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state according to the type of the second special figure jackpot that has occurred. Specifically, when the generated second special figure jackpot is either a 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type E, an 8R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type F, or a 3R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type G. Is controlled to a high accuracy and high base state. On the other hand, when the generated second special figure jackpot is a 3R normal jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type H, it is controlled to a low accuracy and high base state.

If the second special figure game is started in the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state and the second special figure jackpot occurs in the second special figure game, the state is again in the second special figure jackpot game state. Will migrate. In this case, it becomes a so-called consecutive villa state. On the other hand, if the second special figure game cannot be started in the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state, the state shifts to the normal state. Although not shown, when the first special figure game is started in the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state and the first special figure jackpot occurs in the first special figure game, the first The state shifts to the special figure jackpot game state.

(Main processing related to feature 48F)
As described above, when the first special figure jackpot occurs with even-numbered symbols and then the state shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, or when the even-numbered symbols are aligned and the second special symbol jackpot occurs. If the state shifts to a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state due to the occurrence of Is extremely difficult to distinguish. Therefore, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F executes a suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the player is in the probabilistic state by pressing and holding the trigger button of the stick controller 31A within a predetermined valid period. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that the long press on the trigger button of the stick controller 31A for executing the suggestion effect is not prompted by the player, and only a known player can press and hold the trigger button. Also called "operation".

The main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-3 to 10-8.

(Operation-related setting processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing a variable display operation-related setting process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The operation-related setting process during variable display is a process included in the variable display start setting process (S171) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the effect control command output from the main board 11, and the variation to be performed from now on is a variation in which the time reduction and the number of times of control of the electric support are 100 times (hereinafter, this). It is determined whether or not such a fluctuation is (referred to as "final fluctuation") (48FS001). If it is not the final fluctuation (48FS001; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation-related setting process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is the final variation (48FS001; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display pattern of the result screen (48FS002). The result screen shows the result of the game in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as the number of big hits since the first special figure big hit occurred, the number of acquired game balls associated therewith, and the number of times the consecutive villa state is continued. It is a screen. The result screen is a part of the common effect, and is displayed in a mode common to the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state. The effect control CPU 120 determines the display content and display timing of the result screen in the process of 48FS002.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final variation is a jackpot variation based on the effect control command (48FS003). When the final variation is not a big hit variation (48FS003; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the suggestion effect at the time of the final variation (48FS004). The suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation is a suggestion effect performed only when the back operation is performed when the final variation of the special symbol is not a jackpot variation.

Here, the execution pattern of the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 10-8 (A). FIG. 10-8 is a diagram showing a table for determining an execution pattern of the suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation is the jackpot that is the suggestion target regardless of the type of the common effect that is executed in the state after the jackpot that is the suggestion target (current state). Only the lighting color of the lamp differs depending on whether the latter state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. As the lamp in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-9 described later, a board surface lamp 48F050 that imitates a character provided on the game board surface is applied.

When the common effect A is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the state after the big hit to be suggested is the low accuracy high base state, while the state after the big hit to be suggested is In the high accuracy and high base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red. When the common effect B is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the state after the big hit to be suggested is the low accuracy high base state, while the state after the big hit to be suggested is In the high accuracy and high base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red. In both the common effect A and the common effect B, no voice suggestion is performed in the final variation suggestion effect.

As described above, in the final variation suggestion effect, the mode of the lamp lighting color when suggesting the state is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, when the final fluctuation is the jackpot fluctuation (48FS003; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot effect flag indicating the jackpot variation to ON (48F005). The effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the jackpot effect during back operation (48FS006). The big hit effect during back movement is an effect that is performed only when the final fluctuation of the special symbol is a big hit fluctuation and the final fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation within the valid period, and the symbol is stopped. It is a jackpot production that suggests to the player before the final result is obtained.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the resurrection jackpot effect (48FS007). The resurrection jackpot effect is an effect performed when the final variation of the special symbol is a jackpot variation, and suggests to the player that the final variation is a jackpot variation when the final result is obtained by stopping the symbol. It is a big hit production.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the valid period of back motion detection after the processing of 48FS004 or the processing of 48FS007 (48FS008). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the valid period of the back motion detection based on the display timing of the result screen determined in the process of 48FS002. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 starts counting the valid period at the timing when the display of the result screen starts, and ends the counting of the valid period at a timing before the timing when the display of the result screen ends. Set the validity period so that it does. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation-related setting process during the variable display.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has a display pattern of the result screen and an execution pattern of the suggestion effect at the time of the final change as a preliminary preparation before starting the final change in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit. , Execution pattern of jackpot effect during back motion, execution pattern of resurrection jackpot effect, and valid period of back motion detection.

The effect control CPU 120 may execute the execution pattern of the final variation suggestion effect and the execution pattern of the back operation jackpot effect in the variable display middle-back operation detection process described later. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution pattern of the final variation suggestion effect when the back operation is detected in the variable display middle-back operation detection process if it is not a jackpot fluctuation, or the effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution pattern of the final variation suggestion effect. In some cases, the execution pattern of the jackpot effect during the back operation may be determined.

(Variable display back motion detection processing)
FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing a variable display middle-back motion detection process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The variable display middle-back motion detection process is a process included in the variable display middle-effect process (S172) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the back operation is detected (48FS021). When the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the back operation (48FS021; NO), the back operation detection process during the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 detects the back operation (48FS021; YES), it determines whether or not it is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS022). If the effect control CPU 120 is not within the valid period of the back operation (48FS022; NO), the operation detection process during variable display ends.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS022; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (48FS023). When the jackpot effect flag is not set to ON (48FS023; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation (48FS024). On the other hand, when the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (48FS023; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot effect during back operation (48FS025). The effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display middle-back operation detection process after the 48FS024 process or the 48FS025 process.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 120 detects a back motion within the valid period in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit, the final fluctuation is not the big hit fluctuation. Executes a suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation, and executes a jackpot effect at the time of back operation when the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation.

(Specific motion detection processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing a specific motion detection process during variable display executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The variable display specific operation detection process is a process included in the variable display effect process (S172) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a specific operation has been detected (48FS041). The specific operation is an operation performed by the player, and in the present embodiment, the player presses and holds the trigger button of the stick controller 31A. The player is urged to perform a specific action by the promotion notification. For example, a character image of "hold down the trigger" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The specific operation is not limited to the long press on the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, but may be a continuous press of the trigger button, a long press or continuous press of the push button 31B, or a single operation thereof. Further, when a sensor for non-contactly detecting the movement of the player's hand or the like is provided, the suggestion effect may be executed when the sensor detects the movement of the player's hand or the like. Further, not limited to the movement of the player's body, the voice emitted by the player may be detected by the microphone, or the line of sight of the player may be detected by eye tracking. Further, the specific operation may be the same operation as the back operation, or may be an operation different from the back operation.

When the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the specific operation (48FS041; NO), the specific operation detection process during the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 detects a specific operation (48FS041; YES), it determines whether or not the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (48FS042). When the jackpot effect flag is not set to ON (48FS042; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific operation detection process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (48FS042; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the promotion notification is being executed (48FS043). The promotion notification is a notification that is performed in the final variation and prompts the player to perform a specific action. The effect control CPU 120 ends the specific operation detection process during variable display when the promotion notification is not executed (48FS043; NO), that is, when the specific operation is performed by the player without executing the promotion notification. do.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the resurrection jackpot effect when the promotion notification is executed (48FS043; YES), that is, when the player is prompted to execute the promotion notification and a specific operation is performed (the effect control CPU 120). 48FS044). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific operation detection process during variable display when the promotion notification is not executed (48FS043; NO) or after the process of 48FS044.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 120 detects a specific operation after the promotion notification is executed in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit, the final fluctuation is the big hit fluctuation. If it is, the revival jackpot production is executed.

(Operation-related setting processing during big hit)
FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing a jackpot operation-related setting process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The big hit operation-related setting process is a process included in the big hit middle effect process (S176) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start of the third round in the second special figure jackpot game state based on the effect control command output from the main board 11. (48FS061). When it is the start of the third round in the second special figure jackpot game state (48FS061; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the suggestion effect during the jackpot (48FS062). The jackpot suggestion effect is a suggestion effect performed only during the second special figure jackpot game state.

Here, the execution pattern of the suggestion effect during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 10-8 (B). As shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the suggestion effect during the big hit is the suggestion target regardless of the type of the common effect executed in the state of the suggestion target (the state in which the second special figure big hit occurs). The lighting color of the lamp differs depending on whether the state is a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state. As the lamp in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-11 described later, a board surface lamp 48F050 that imitates a character provided on the game board surface is applied. That is, the lamp used in the suggestion effect during the big hit is the same as the lamp used in the suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation. Further, the suggestion effect during the jackpot depends on the type of the common effect that was executed in the state to be suggested and whether the state to be suggested is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. The sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is different.

When the common effect A is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the suggestion target state is the low accuracy high base state, and the "normal" sound is output while the sound is output. When the state to be suggested is the high accuracy and high base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red, and the voice of "hot" is output. When the common effect B is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the suggestion target state is the low accuracy high base state, and the voice of "normal" is output while the sound is output. When the state to be suggested is the high accuracy and high base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red, and the voice of "hot trap" is output.

As described above, in the jackpot suggestion effect, the lamp lighting color mode when suggesting the state is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected, while the state is changed. The mode of voice when suggesting is different.

Further, the execution pattern of the final variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) and the execution pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) differ in the presence or absence of audio output, while the lamp. The lighting color is common. Specifically, in the final fluctuation suggestion effect, the state is suggested by the lighting by the board lamp 48F050, while the state is not suggested by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas in the jackpot suggestion effect, the state is not suggested. , Board lamp 48F050 and speakers 8L, 8R both suggest the condition.

Returning to FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 sets the valid period of the back motion detection when it is not the start of the third round in the second special figure jackpot game state (48FS061; NO) or after the processing of 48FS062. (48FS063). For example, the effect control CPU 120 starts counting the valid period at the timing when the third round in the second special figure jackpot game state starts, and is effective at a timing before the timing when the second special figure jackpot game state ends. Set the validity period to end the period counting. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation-related setting process during the big hit.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution pattern of the jackpot inviting effect and the valid period of the back motion detection at the start of the third round in the second special figure jackpot game state.

(Big hit middle back motion detection process)
FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing a jackpot middle-back motion detection process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The big hit middle-back operation detection process is a process included in the big hit middle effect process (S176) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the back operation is detected (48FS081). When the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the back operation (48FS081; NO), the jackpot middle back operation detection process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 detects the back operation (48FS081; YES), it determines whether or not it is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS082). If the effect control CPU 120 is not within the valid period of the back operation (48FS082; NO), the jackpot middle back operation detection process ends.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS082; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the suggestion effect during the jackpot (48FS083). After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the jackpot middle-back operation detection process.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot suggestion effect when the back motion is detected within the valid period in the second special figure jackpot game state.

(Example of implementation of suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation)
FIG. 10-9 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the 100th fluctuation of the time saving / electric support (when the loss fluctuates). In the timing chart shown in FIG. 10-9, a line indicating the start or stop of the variable display in the final fluctuation, a line indicating whether or not the common effect is executed (ON: executing, OFF: not executing), and a valid period A line indicating the presence / absence (ON: within the valid period, OFF: outside the valid period) and a line indicating the presence / absence of detection of the back operation (ON: with detection, OFF: without detection) are included. The example shown in FIG. 10-9 can be applied to both the low accuracy and high base state and the high accuracy and high base state.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, after the variable display in the final fluctuation starts at t1, the display of the result screen starts at t2. Specifically, after "0 times" is displayed as the number of big hits and "0" is displayed as the number of acquisitions, these numbers are added and updated by counting up and displayed. Then, the validity period starts at the timing when the display of the result screen starts at t2. In this way, since the start of the valid period coincides with the start of the display of the result screen, the player can recognize the start timing of the valid period by displaying the result screen.

When the back motion is detected at t3 within the valid period, the final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. In addition, promotion notification is not performed for the back operation. In the final variation suggestion effect, the board lamp 48F050 is turned on according to the execution pattern shown in FIG. 10-8 (A). No sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The validity period ends at t4 before the display of the result screen ends. After that, at t5, the variable display in the final fluctuation is stopped and the common effect is finished, and the final result (in this example, 3 big hits and 3500 acquisitions) is displayed on the result screen. After that, the state shifts to the normal state.

In this way, when the final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit, when the back motion is detected within the valid period without the promotion notification being performed. , It is suggested whether or not the state after the big hit was a probabilistic state by executing the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation.

(Example of implementation of big hit production)
FIG. 10-10 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the 100th fluctuation of the time saving / electric support (when the jackpot fluctuates). In the timing chart shown in FIG. 10-10, a line indicating the start or stop of the variable display in the final fluctuation, a line indicating whether or not the common effect is executed (ON: executing, OFF: not executing), and a valid period A line indicating the presence / absence (ON: within the valid period, OFF: outside the valid period) and a line indicating the presence / absence of detection of the back operation (ON: with detection, OFF: without detection) are included. The example shown in FIG. 10-10 can be applied to both the low accuracy and high base state and the high accuracy and high base state.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, after the variable display in the final fluctuation starts at t11, the display of the result screen starts at t12. Specifically, after "0 times" is displayed as the number of big hits and "0" is displayed as the number of acquisitions, these numbers are added and updated by counting up and displayed. Then, the validity period starts at the timing when the display of the result screen starts at t12.

When the back operation is detected at t13 within the valid period, the big hit effect during the back operation is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. In addition, promotion notification is not performed for the back operation. The jackpot effect during the back operation is suggested in advance in a manner different from the suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation and the suggestion effect during the jackpot. Specifically, in the big hit effect during back operation, the sound of "Papala" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a star-shaped image is displayed as a cut-in on the screen of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the board lamp 48F050 does not light in the big hit effect during the back operation in this example.

The validity period ends at t14 before the display of the result screen ends. After that, the common effect ends at t15, and the final result (in this example, 3 big hits and 3500 acquisitions) is displayed on the result screen. Then, the jackpot is notified by the accessory effect (the effect of moving by a movable object (not shown)), and the variable display in the final fluctuation is stopped (the jackpot symbol is stopped) at t16. If the back motion is not detected within the valid period, the promotion notification is performed during the period from t15 to t16, and the promotion notification prompts the specific operation to perform the revival jackpot effect. NS. After that, the state shifts to the second special figure jackpot game state.

In this way, when the final fluctuation is the jackpot fluctuation in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the jackpot, when the back motion is detected within the valid period without the promotion notification being performed. , The jackpot is notified by executing the jackpot effect during the back operation instead of executing the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation.

In addition, the jackpot effect during the back operation suggests a jackpot in a manner different from the suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation and the suggestion effect during the jackpot. The jackpot effect during back operation is not limited to the one using the speakers 8L and 8R and the image display device 5, and may be an accessory effect by a movable device (not shown).

(Example of implementation of suggestion production during big hit)
FIG. 10-11 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the second special figure big hit game state. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 10-11, a line showing the presence / absence of control of the jackpot gaming state (ON: during the jackpot gaming state, OFF: during the non-big hit gaming state) and a line indicating the presence / absence of the valid period (ON: valid period). Among them, OFF: outside the valid period) and a line indicating whether or not the back operation is detected (ON: with detection, OFF: without detection) are included. The example shown in FIG. 10-11 shows an example of the second special figure jackpot game state controlled from the high accuracy and high base state.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state at t21, the selection of the song in the jackpot gaming state is accepted at the 1st and 2nd rounds. During this time, the player can select the song in the jackpot game state. The validity period starts at t22 when the 3rd round of the jackpot game state starts. The reason why the 1st and 2nd Rs are not valid is that the trigger button of the stick controller 31A is used when selecting a song, as in the back operation.

When the back motion is detected at t23 within the valid period, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. In addition, promotion notification is not performed for the back operation. In the jackpot suggestion effect, the board lamp 48F050 is turned on and the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the execution pattern shown in FIG. 10-8 (B).

The validity period ends at t24 before the end of the final round (16R in this example) of the jackpot game state. After that, the jackpot game state ends at t25. After that, in this example, the state shifts to the high accuracy and high base state.

In this way, in the second special figure big hit game state via the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state, when the back motion is detected within the valid period without performing the promotion notification, the suggestion effect during the big hit is produced. Is executed, and it is suggested whether or not the state that has passed through to reach the second special figure jackpot game state is a probabilistic state.

Further, in the final fluctuation suggestion effect, the state is suggested by the lighting by the board lamp 48F050, while the state is not suggested by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas in the jackpot suggestion effect, the board lamp The condition is suggested by both the 48F050 and the speakers 8L, 8R.

(Main effect of feature 48F)
As shown in FIG. 10-2, a common effect common to the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-9, since the common effect ends after the display of the result screen starts in the final variation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, the player can see the result screen in the final variation. The end of the common effect can be specified by the start of the display. Then, after the result screen display starts in the final fluctuation, the back operation becomes effective for the valid period. As shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-9, when the back motion by the player is detected without the promotion notification being performed during this valid period, the final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed based on the back motion. This suggests whether or not the state in which the common effect is being executed is a probabilistic state.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because it changes whether or not the probabilistic state is suggested depending on whether or not the player has acted behind the scenes according to his or her own preference without being prompted by the promotion notification. .. For example, a player who knows the back movement can know whether or not the previous state is a probabilistic state by performing the back movement within the valid period, so that a player who does not know the back movement Can also add variety to the game. On the other hand, even a player who knows the back movement does not have to perform the back movement within the valid period if he / she does not want to know whether or not the state so far is a probabilistic state. In this case, the final fluctuation You can play while expecting to be in a probable state until the symbol stops at.

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11, the game is played without promotion notification in the second special figure jackpot game state controlled in the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state in which the common effect is performed. When the back motion by a person is detected, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed based on the back motion, and it is suggested whether or not the state in which the common effect is executed is the probability change state.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because it changes whether or not the probabilistic state is suggested depending on whether or not the player has acted behind the scenes according to his or her own preference without being prompted by the promotion notification. .. For example, a player who knows the back movement performs the back movement in the second special figure big hit game state, so that the second special figure big hit game state under control has passed from the probability change state, or is being controlled. 2nd special figure Since it is possible to know whether the jackpot game state has passed from the non-probability change state, it is possible to give more variety to the game than a player who does not know the back action. On the other hand, even a player who knows the back movement does not have to perform the back movement in the second special figure jackpot game state if he / she does not want to know whether or not the state so far is a probabilistic state. In that case, the production is not excessively performed.

The back action that triggers the suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation and the back action that triggers the suggestion effect during the big hit are both long presses of the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, and both are common.

As a result, the content of the back motion that triggers the execution of the suggestion effect does not change regardless of the situation during the final fluctuation or during the second special figure jackpot game state, so that the back motion becomes complicated. Can be prevented as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the final variation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect differ in some aspects but in common with other aspects. Specifically, in the final fluctuation suggestion effect, the state is suggested by the lighting by the board lamp 48F050, while the state is not suggested by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas in the jackpot suggestion effect, the state is not suggested. , Board lamp 48F050 and speakers 8L, 8R both suggest the condition.

As a result, a part of the execution mode of the suggestion effect differs depending on whether the situation is during the final change or during the second special figure big hit game state, so that the state suggestion should be appropriately performed according to the situation. Can be done. In particular, at the time of the final change when the common effect ends, there is a high possibility that the state will shift to the normal state after that, so it is the same as the case where it is in an advantageous state for the player as in the second special figure big hit game state. If the suggestion effect is executed in the manner, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of disappointment. However, as in the present embodiment, in the final variation suggestion effect, the excessive disappointment as described above can be reduced as much as possible by reducing the types of effect means used as compared with the jackpot suggestion effect. can.

As shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-10, when the back motion by the player is detected without the promotion notification being performed during the valid period when the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the back motion is based on the back motion. The jackpot is suggested in advance by executing the jackpot effect during the back operation.

As a result, a player who knows the back movement can know in advance whether or not the jackpot has been decided by performing the back movement within the valid period, so that the player who does not know the back movement can know in advance. It is possible to give diversity to the game. On the other hand, even a player who knows the back movement does not have to perform the back movement within the valid period unless he / she wants to know in advance whether or not the jackpot has been decided. You can play while expecting a big hit until the game stops.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the mode in the jackpot suggestion effect differs depending on the type of common effect selected by the player. Specifically, in the common production A in which the male character appears as the main character, the voice of the male character is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while in the common production B in which the female character appears as the main character, the voice of the female character is output. It is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regardless of which of the common effect A and the common effect B is selected, the lighting mode by the board lamp 48F050 is common.

As a result, a part of the execution mode of the jackpot suggestion effect is different depending on the type of the common effect selected by the player, so that the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

(Modification example of the gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F)
Although the feature portion 48F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 48F will be described below.

(About suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, as a suggestion effect performed during the back operation, an effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a probabilistic state is illustrated, but the suggestion effect is a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the gaming machine. It may be a production. The execution pattern of the setting suggestion will be described with reference to FIG. 10-12. FIG. 10-12 is a diagram showing a table for determining the execution pattern of the setting suggestion in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example according to the feature portion 48F.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation has a different probability depending on the current set value regardless of the type of the common effect, and only the lamp lighting color is different. Specifically, regardless of which of the common effect A and the common effect B is selected, when the set value 1 or the set value 2 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes blue is higher than that of the other colors, and the set value 3 Alternatively, when the set value is 4, the probability that the lamp lighting color will be green is higher than that of the other colors, and when the set value is 5 or the setting value is 6, the probability that the lamp lighting color will be red is higher than that of the other colors. In both the common effect A and the common effect B, no voice suggestion is performed in the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation.

As described above, in the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation, the mode of the lamp lighting color when suggesting the state is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B), in the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot, the lamp lighting color is different with a different probability depending on the current set value regardless of the type of the common effect. Specifically, regardless of which of the common effect A and the common effect B is selected, when the set value 1 or the set value 2 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes blue is higher than that of the other colors, and the set value 3 Alternatively, when the set value is 4, the probability that the lamp lighting color will be green is higher than that of the other colors, and when the set value is 5 or the setting value is 6, the probability that the lamp lighting color will be red is higher than that of the other colors.

Further, the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is different with a different probability depending on the type of common effect and the current set value. Specifically, when the common effect A is selected, when the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is set, the probability that the “normal” voice is output is higher than the other voices, and the setting value 3 or the setting value is set. When it is 4, the probability that the voice of "hot" is output is higher than that of other voices, and when it is the setting value 5 or the setting value 6, the probability that the voice of "hot heat" is output is other voices. Higher than. On the other hand, when the common effect B is selected, when the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is set, the probability that the “normal” voice is output is higher than the other voices, and the setting value 3 or the setting value 4 is set. Sometimes, the probability that the voice of "hot" is output is higher than that of other voices, and when the setting value is 5 or 6, the probability that the voice of "hot heat" is output is higher than that of other voices. Is also expensive.

As described above, in the setting suggestion effect during the big hit, the mode of the lamp lighting color when suggesting the set value is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected. , The mode of voice when suggesting the set value is different. In the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation and the setting suggestion effect during the big hit, the lighting color of one lamp may correspond to the current set value. For example, when the setting value is 1 or 2, the lamp lighting color is blue, when the setting value is 3 or 4, the lamp lighting color is green, and when the setting value is 5 or 6, the lamp is lit. The color may be red. Further, in the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot, one voice may correspond to the current set value according to the type of the common effect.

Further, the period in which the back motion suggests whether or not the state is probable and the period in which the set value is suggested by the back action may be separated. For example, in the second special figure jackpot game state, it suggests whether or not it is in a probabilistic state by being back-operated in the middle round, and suggesting a set value by being back-operated during the ending in the final round. It may be.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the lighting color of one lamp corresponds to the state of the suggestion target, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, one lamp lighting color may be determined from a plurality of types of lamp lighting colors at a ratio according to the state of the suggestion target. For example, in the final variation suggestion effect, in both the common effect A and the common effect B, the probability is determined to be blue with a higher probability than red in the low accuracy and high base state, and the probability is higher than blue in the high accuracy and high base state. May be determined to be red. Similarly, in the jackpot suggestion effect, in both the common effect A and the common effect B, the probability is determined to be blue with a higher probability than red in the low accuracy high base state, and the probability is higher than blue in the high accuracy high base state. May be determined to be red. Further, their selection probabilities may be the same for the final variation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the lamp lighting color mode is the same for the final fluctuation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect, but the lamp lighting color mode is different between the two. There may be.

The pachinko gaming machine is not limited to executing both the final fluctuation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect, and may execute only one of them.

In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect at the time of the final change and the suggestion effect during the big hit suggest whether or not the player is in the probabilistic state, but other states and benefits may be suggested. For example, the final fluctuation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect may indicate whether or not the time is shortened.

In the present embodiment, an example of executing the jackpot suggestion effect during the jackpot gaming state when the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs (during the 16R probability variation jackpot round) has been described, but the jackpot gaming state when the 8R probability variation jackpot occurs. The suggestion effect during the jackpot may be executed even during the medium (during the 8R probability variation jackpot round) or during the jackpot gaming state when the 3R probability variation jackpot occurs (during the 3R probability variation jackpot round).

The jackpot suggestion effect may or may not be executed depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. For example, during the 16R probability variation jackpot round or the 8R probability variation jackpot round, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed, whereas during the 3R probability variation jackpot round, the jackpot suggestion effect may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the game becoming monotonous due to the large number of jackpot rounds as much as possible. Alternatively, while the jackpot suggestion effect is executed during the 3R probability variation jackpot round, the jackpot suggestion effect may not be executed during the 16R probability variation jackpot round or the 8R probability variation jackpot round. In this way, the disappointment that the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot did not occur can be minimized by the variety of games by the suggestion effect during the jackpot.

The jackpot suggestion effect may be executed with different probabilities depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. For example, the suggestion effect during the jackpot may be executed with a higher probability in the order of the 16R probability variation jackpot round, the 8R probability variation jackpot round, and the 3R probability variation jackpot round. Alternatively, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed with a higher probability in the order of the 3R probability variation jackpot round, the 8R probability variation jackpot round, and the 16R probability variation jackpot round. In this way, the game can be varied.

The jackpot suggestion effect suggested the state before being controlled to the jackpot game state (that is, the state in which the second special figure jackpot occurred), but the suggestion target of the jackpot suggestion effect is not limited to this. .. For example, the suggestion effect during the jackpot may be suggested by adding the state after the round of the second special figure jackpot is completed. Specifically, when a normal jackpot occurs in a low probability state, an image or sound suggesting "previous normal + next normal" may be output, and when a probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability state. May output an image or sound that suggests "previous normal + next normal", and if a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability state, an image or sound that suggests "previous normal + next normal" may be output. May be output, and when a probability variation jackpot occurs in a high accuracy state, an image or sound suggesting "previous probability variation + next probability variation" may be output. In this way, the suggestion content of the jackpot suggestion effect may be different depending on the combination of the previous state and the next state.

The suggestion effect during the jackpot may have different suggestion targets depending on which period during the jackpot gaming state is controlled. For example, in the period from the fanfare effect that notifies that the second special figure jackpot has occurred to the second round, the previous state is suggested by the jackpot suggestion effect, and in the period from the third round to the ending effect, the jackpot is in progress. The next state may be suggested by the suggestion effect. In this way, the round period during the jackpot game state may be divided into the first half and the second half, and the suggestion target of the jackpot suggestion effect may be different between the two. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the game becoming monotonous due to the large number of jackpot rounds as much as possible. In addition, although the mode of the back movement may be different between the first half and the second half of the round period during the big hit game state, it is kinder for the player to have the same mode of the back movement between the first half and the second half.

(About back operation)
In the present embodiment, the back operation is illustrated by pressing and holding the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, but the back operation may be another operation. For example, the back operation may be a continuous hit of the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, a long press or a continuous hit of the push button 31B, or a single operation thereof. Further, the back operation may be one in which the trigger button, the push button 31B, or the like of the stick controller 31A is operated by a predetermined operation procedure (command procedure). Further, when a sensor for non-contactly detecting the movement of the player's hand or the like is provided, the back movement may be the movement of the player's hand or the like detected by the sensor. Further, not limited to the movement of the player's body, the voice emitted by the player may be detected by the microphone as a back motion, or the line of sight of the player may be detected by eye tracking as the back motion.

(About common production)
In the present embodiment, as common effects, a common effect A in which a male character appears as the main character and a common effect B in which a female character appears as the main character are illustrated, but the common effects may be other effects. .. For example, the common effect is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In addition, not only all the effects are common to the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, but also the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state are included in the common effects that can be selected by the player. It suffices if the common production is included. Further, the common effect is not selected by the player, but may be automatically selected by a lottery or the like.

In addition, the plurality of types of common effects are not limited to those in which the background and the characters appearing are different from each other, and the mode of big hit notice and reach notice, and the mode of promotion notification that encourages the player to operate the trigger button and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. , And other effects such as a mission effect that imposes a predetermined mission on the player and gives a privilege to the player when the mission is achieved, may be different from each other.

(About the validity period at the time of the final fluctuation)
In the present embodiment, the start timing of the valid period at the time of the final fluctuation matches the timing at which the display of the result screen starts, but the start timing of the valid period is not limited to this. The validity period may start at any timing of the period from the start of the final fluctuation to the final stop of the symbol. For example, the validity period may start at the timing when the final fluctuation starts. Further, the validity period may be started at a timing in the middle of the final fluctuation. As an example in which the validity period starts at the timing in the middle of the final fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the timing at which the display of the result screen starts and the count-up of the result of the game such as the number of big hits and the number of acquisitions on the result screen are counted up. The timing to start is assumed. Further, if the count is displayed while subtracting the number of STs, the validity period is at the timing when the player can identify the state where there is no remaining number of STs (for example, the timing when the display of the number of STs becomes "0"). May start. The result screen does not necessarily have to be displayed at the time of the final fluctuation, but in any case, it is preferable that the valid period starts at a timing that can be specified by the player.

In the present embodiment, the end timing of the valid period at the time of the final change is the timing before the display of the result screen ends, but the valid period ends at the timing when the symbol finally stops in the final change. You may. The validity period may be a period during which the player can identify the end of the common effect.

(Regarding the validity period in the second special figure jackpot game state)
In the present embodiment, the start timing of the valid period in the second special figure jackpot game state matches the start timing of the 3Rs, but the start timing of the valid period is not limited to this. The validity period may start at any timing of the period from the start of the first round of the second special figure jackpot game state to the end of the final round. For example, the valid period may start at the timing when the second special figure big hit game state starts. Further, the valid period may be started at a timing in the middle of the second special figure big hit game state. As an example in which the valid period starts at a timing in the middle of the second special figure big hit game state, as shown in FIG. 10-11, the timing at which the 3Rs start is assumed. Further, as long as the fanfare effect for notifying that the second special figure jackpot has occurred is executed, the valid period may start at the timing when the fanfare effect starts.

In the present embodiment, the end timing of the valid period in the second special figure jackpot game state is the timing before the end of the final round, but the valid period may end at the timing when the final round ends. ..

Further, a valid period may be provided in the final round in the second special figure jackpot game state, or a valid period may be provided in the execution period of the ending effect performed in the final round. In recent gaming machines, the production such as the ending production tends to be long so as to suppress the ball output rate of the entire game as much as possible. It is possible to alleviate the delay as much as possible by suggesting the back movement. When an ending effect with a short production period and an ending effect with a longer production period than the ending effect are provided, a valid period is not provided during the execution period of the ending effect with a shorter production period, whereas the production period A valid period may be provided in the execution period of the long ending effect.

The validity period in the second special figure jackpot game state may be provided only during the round of the jackpot game, may be provided only between the adjacent rounds before and after (so-called inter-round interval), and the rounds and It may be provided at all intervals between rounds.

(About big hit production at the time of back operation)
In the present embodiment, when the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation and the back operation is performed during the valid period, the jackpot effect during the back operation is executed instead of the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation and the back operation is performed during the valid period, the final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed and the back operation jackpot effect is executed. Alternatively, the back operation jackpot effect may be executed after the final variation suggestion effect is executed, or the final variation suggestion effect may be executed after the back motion jackpot effect is executed.

(About promotion notification)
In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed by operating behind the scenes without performing the promotion notification, but the promotion notification may be performed when the suggestion effect is executed. .. For example, by displaying a predetermined procedure (for example, button pressing × 10 times) at a position that is difficult for the player to recognize (for example, an area covered by a decoration or a movable object on the screen of the image display device 5). The procedure of the back operation may be notified to the player.

(About application to slot machines)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the feature unit 48F is applied to the pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the feature unit 48F may be applied to the slot machine. Generally, a slot machine is provided with a plurality of variable display units (reels, display windows) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs), each of which can be identified, and after variable display of the variable display unit, variable display is performed. By stopping the variable display of the part, the display result (stop display of the symbol) is derived, and a prize can be generated according to the display result combination (stop display of the symbol combination) which is a combination of the display results of a plurality of variable display units. Is.

In the slot machine as described above, the operation mode (operation procedure, operation timing) of the derivation operation means (stop switch) for deriving the display result combination that causes the player to win a prize is controlled in an advantageous section that can be notified. It is possible to do. In the advantageous section, the AT (assist time), which is not controlled in the non-advantageous section (normal section), is controlled to give an advantageous prize (for example, a small winning combination that gives a larger number of payouts than the number of bets). Therefore, there is a high possibility that the payout rate in the advantageous section will exceed 1.

Such a state in AT may be suggested by a suggestion effect related to the feature unit 48F. Specifically, the AT ends by digesting the given number of sets, but when one set is digested, the AT continues by shifting to the next set at a predetermined continuation rate. That is, the higher the AT continuation rate, the longer the AT, which is in an advantageous state, will continue. Then, if a plurality of types of ATs having different continuation rates are provided and a common effect common to each other is executed in the plurality of types of ATs, the player will play while predicting the continuation rate of the ATs. ..

For example, when the feature unit 48F is applied to the slot machine described above, when the result display indicating the number of payouts of the AT is displayed in the final set of the AT, the operation means (effect button, etc.) without performing the promotion notification is performed. ) Is operated to indicate the continuation rate of the AT to be terminated by the lamp lighting color or the like.

Even when the feature unit 48F is applied to the slot machine in this way, the same effect as that of the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F in the above-described embodiment is obtained.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature portion 48F).
See state control means (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, FIG. 10-2) for controlling one of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state and probable change state) having different advantages for the player. )When,
A motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, back motion, specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) and the promotion notification means for prompting the player to perform an operation (for example, a specific operation) detected by the operation detection means.
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, a common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, a control period of a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
A suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing a suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation in 48FS024 of FIG. 10-4 by the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion means is a specific period during which the player can specify the end of the common effect (for example, a period during which the result screen is displayed and a valid period of t2 to t4 in FIG. 10-9). In the above, it is possible to suggest a state in the predetermined period based on the fact that the player's motion (for example, back motion) is detected by the motion detecting means without performing the promotion notification (for example, FIG. 10-). 4, see Fig. 10-9),
Moreover,
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can launch a gaming medium into the gaming area
Signal generation means (test signal processing, etc.) for generating test signals (test signals A to G, etc.) to be output to the outside of the gaming machine, and
Granting means for granting the game medium based on the winning of the game medium (game ball, etc.) (processing in which the CPU 103 pays out the game ball (prize ball), etc.)
The ratio of the number of game media (number of prize balls in the normal state, etc.) given by the granting means to the number of game media (number of balls launched in the normal state, etc.) fired in the game area in a predetermined state (normal state base, etc.) Calculation means (display monitor processing, etc.) for calculating specific information (normal state base, data processed from normal state base, etc.)
It is provided with a display means (display monitor 207SG029 or the like) capable of displaying the specific information in the predetermined state calculated by the calculation means.
The calculation means can specify the predetermined state based on the information (test flags A to G, etc.) used by the signal generation means for generating the test signal that can specify the gaming state of the test signals. There is a gaming machine (as shown in FIG. 12-2, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the test flags A to G).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to such a configuration, by using the information used for generating the test signal for specifying the gaming state, it is possible to display the specific information regarding the number of game media given.

(2) A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature portion 48F).
An advantageous state control means (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, FIG. 5 by the CPU 103) that controls a state different from the advantageous state but one of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state and probable change state) having different advantages for the player. Special symbol process processing, see Fig. 10-2) and
A motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, back motion, specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) and the promotion notification means for prompting the player to perform an operation (for example, a specific operation) detected by the operation detection means.
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, a common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, a control period of a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
A suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing a jackpot suggestion effect at 48FS083 in FIG. 10-7 by the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
In the advantageous state (for example, the second special figure big hit game state) controlled in the predetermined period, the suggestion means moves the player (for example, back action) by the motion detecting means without performing the promotion notification. ) Can be suggested based on the detection of) (see, for example, FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11).
Moreover,
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can launch a gaming medium into the gaming area
Signal generation means (test signal processing, etc.) for generating test signals (test signals A to G, etc.) to be output to the outside of the gaming machine, and
Granting means for granting the game medium based on the winning of the game medium (game ball, etc.) (processing in which the CPU 103 pays out the game ball (prize ball), etc.)
The ratio of the number of game media (number of prize balls in the normal state, etc.) given by the granting means to the number of game media (number of balls launched in the normal state, etc.) fired in the game area in a predetermined state (normal state base, etc.) Calculation means (display monitor processing, etc.) for calculating specific information (normal state base, data processed from normal state base, etc.)
It is provided with a display means (display monitor 207SG029 or the like) capable of displaying the specific information in the predetermined state calculated by the calculation means.
The calculation means can specify the predetermined state based on the information (test flags A to G, etc.) used by the signal generation means for generating the test signal that can specify the gaming state of the test signals. There is a gaming machine (as shown in FIG. 12-2, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the test flags A to G).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to such a configuration, by using the information used for generating the test signal for specifying the gaming state, it is possible to display the specific information regarding the number of game media given.

Further, the display means may calculate and display the number of times the player's movement is detected. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the degree of participation of the player.

Further, the display means may be able to display the controlled period in any state. By doing so, it becomes possible to specify each period according to the controlled state.

In addition, the period in which the promotion notification is not performed in a predetermined period or a specific period is classified into a plurality of types, and the type of the period when the movement of the player is detected by the motion detection means in the period in which the promotion notification is not performed. Depending on the situation, the content suggested by the suggestion means (for example, the ease of understanding which state it is in) may be different. By doing so, the content of the suggestion and the comprehensibility of the state will change depending on the timing at which the movement of the player is detected by the movement detecting means, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as an example of a gaming machine capable of preventing the history information from becoming difficult to confirm and displaying specific information regarding the number of given gaming media, a game in which the gaming medium can be launched into the gaming area. In the machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), a state control means (CPU103 etc.) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of types of gaming states including a predetermined state (normal state etc.) and output to the outside of the gaming machine Signal generation means (test signal processing, etc.) that generates test signals (test signals A to G, etc.)
Granting means for granting the game medium based on the winning of the game medium (game ball, etc.) (processing in which the CPU 103 pays out the game ball (prize ball), etc.) and the game medium launched into the game area in the predetermined state. Specific information (normal state base, normal state base, etc.) regarding the ratio (normal state base, etc.) of the number of game media (normal state prize balls, etc.) given by the granting means to the number (normal state launch ball number, etc.) is processed. Calculation means (display monitor processing, etc.) for calculating (data, etc.)
A display means (display monitor 207SG029 or the like) that can display the specific information in the predetermined state calculated by the calculation means is provided, and the signal generation means specifies a gaming state in the test signal. The predetermined state can be specified based on the information (test flags A to G, etc.) used to generate a possible test signal (based on the test flags A to G, as shown in FIG. 10-2). (It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer goes out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). (Information including the number of super reach times, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 are notified. The RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification is executed) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image in the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-236 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk at the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 after displaying the notification image 207SG005M1) that notifies the fact, emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The setting value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412).

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and 11-8 (C), the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change and a notification during setting value confirmation. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Generally, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of a game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot determine from the display of the image display device 5 whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during setting value change and the notification during confirmation of set value, the pachinko game machine is sent to the clerk of the game hall who changes or confirms the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the first movable body (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to be executed (see FIG. 11-7).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6. FIG. 11-5 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, and FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control at the time of non-detection.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect position (second position), and are provided so as to be able to reciprocate from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during the variable display or the like.

The effect control CPU 120 is movable when the detected portion of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. When the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the game island, or when the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the motor is removed. The movable body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the game machine due to a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the movable body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to the origin or cannot operate due to adjustment, failure, or catching. If it is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. 8-22), the origin is returned. Execute non-detection operation control for. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and are the control speeds set for operating the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG 322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and the other moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section. Movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 when the mode is different between the moving section and other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the moving section rises and falls even in the same moving section. The operating speed when the is actually operated may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322's actual operating speeds are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and size of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are determined. When there are differences in the operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the set actual operation confirmation process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the control speed set in the above. Specifically, control is performed so that after accelerating from the origin position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the effect position, and after accelerating from the effect position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change in the order of high speed → low speed. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed are higher than the minimum speed. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are controlled so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as operating.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG3211 is controlled so as to be the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when the device is stopped at the effect position. After the 207SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control, it is moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the feature unit 207SG in the form of Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When operated at the control speed when accelerating, that is, at high speed, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion, or they can move from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 11-1, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets a value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value has been completed is set (207SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the processing of 207SGS416.

In the 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change is completed. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (207SGS420).

In the 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) is the same process as the 207SGS413. Then, the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as the 207SGS414, is executed, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), the 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and when the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started. To execute. As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When it is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second are performed again. The movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed among the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence state, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization process is not yet completed. In that case, that is, when the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed and the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization being executed are completed. Only the conversion process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

If the 207SGS411 does not receive the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error designation command is received (207SGS425). .. When the error specification command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error specification command is executed, and when the error specification command is not received (207SGS425; N), the error notification process is executed. , 207 SGS 403.

As the error notification in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (D), if the image display device 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. good.

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information). While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since receiving the input of, from the RAM 122, the information for production (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. ) And the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated and stored).

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

Then, in the 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. Start displaying the initial symbol according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. When set, the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when it is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 11-1, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table by executing the start notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the command received at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of notification of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-4, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the output sound A is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Output of the output sound C of the above, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) for 40 seconds is executed on the image display device 5. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

The feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer of a game hall or a management device such as a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification at the time of this, a signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, a part of the device that executes the start notification is common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more pachinko machines are provided, sound is output only from some of the pachinko machines), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the game machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. , The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, set value confirmation end notification command, and set value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the player is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-1, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (207SGS432). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the effect control CPU 120 first has an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (207SGS441). If there is no power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information, player information, etc. stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 11-1, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 8-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for production (207SGS435) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for production such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (207SGS436) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (207SGS437) that outputs the person information and the effect information aggregation process (207SGS438) that aggregates the effect information are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. In addition, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server, thereby performing the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-10, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is set to -1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (207SGS452) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7), any of the processes is executed. By executing the processes of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variation display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being activated, so that the variation display is performed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays based on the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game has become possible, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game are set as settings related to the progress of the game. The amount of light of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set as the factory default state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has a reach effect of super reach A and super reach B as a first suggestion effect, and a super reach C and super reach as a second suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the reach production of D, and when executing the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the Super Reach C or Super Reach D can be executed from the start of the reach production of the Super Reach C or Super Reach D. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D is notified, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The embodiment also includes the invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to suitably notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 207SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22).
In the set state, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 8-23).
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the confirmation state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 207SG,
The display recognizable as the set state or the confirmed state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-27). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed are displayed. Different part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in a set state or a confirmed state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 207SG,
In the set state or the confirmed state, the variable display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state or the confirmed state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). The part that lights all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the variable display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display recognizable as the set state or the confirmation state, a display is performed in which all of the small display units are lit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). The part that lights all the constituent segments)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 6 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a gaming medium into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 207SG002L and right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a launch direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the launch direction of the game medium in the game area.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the launch direction notification unit makes a display recognizable that the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A)). The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed by the launch direction notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 7 of the invention 207SG,
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) that can store information related to the variable display as hold information.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the setting is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that all segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked in the value change state or the set value confirmation state) is described. For example, a suitable notification can be performed on the hold display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state is provided.
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the setting is performed. Of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 in the value change state or set value confirmation state, only one segment is lit)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed by the number-of-times notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) that can store the state information (for example, the RAM clear flag) that can specify the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means, and
With
The game control means
The first condition (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. At this time, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 8-21 (A)) is performed. Feasible and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) are satisfied, the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial stage to be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The initialization process common to the conversion process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, the part where the RAM clear process and the set value change process can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process. Not part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the initialization process can be standardized when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

The embodiment also includes the invention 208SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to preferably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 208SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B)). If an error occurs in excess of the set value, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area in which a variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 208SG,
A gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or greater than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is described. It is possible to preferably notify that an error regarding the storage area in which is stored occurs and that the set value needs to be reset.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if there is no error, a display that can identify the occurrence of an error is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 287 (B), even when the power failure during the setting change is restored, the first special symbol is displayed. A part that blinks all the segments constituting the display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurs before the set value is confirmed without setting a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that the above is true.

The embodiment also includes the invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming a set value are used. There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are provided individually. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 209SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine that can play a game using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value adding means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 8-17 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can identify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which at least the set value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B)). When a setting value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 8-25 (A) and 8-26 (B)). As shown in the above, in both the case of displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and the case of displaying the occurrence of an abnormal error, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display A game machine characterized by (a part using part 207SG029D) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which a set value is stored, and also to notify the set value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be independently lit (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each eight. Part made up of individual segments),
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the initialization condition (for example, the clear switch is ON), the information display means constitutes each display unit. All the display units are lit in the fully lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit are displayed. The part that repeats (blinks) all lighting and all extinguishing of all segments that make up the 207SG029D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 209SG,
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example,). As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after the execution of the 207SGSa015 and the 207SGSa016, the 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.

The embodiment also includes the invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is changed, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirmation operation again after the operation of changing the set value is completed. In this case, when the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first confirmation operation of the movable body, the change operation is completed. There is a problem that the confirmation operation of the new movable body is started from the timing of the movement, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to a setting state in which the set value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, a clear switch and a lock switch are used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control are executed in order),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command and a setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, operation control at the time of non-detection) for causing the return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. It is feasible and can be executed before the control is executed.
When the set state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (for example, a first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process). In the part where the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed after the non-detection self-operation control is completed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the set state or the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the set state or the confirmation state is terminated when the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the first movable unit is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the body initialization process is not executed) On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control by the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is executed (for example, FIG. 11-). As shown in 7 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command by the effect control CPU 120 is completed, and the second movable body initialization is completed. If a setting value change notification command or a setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly completed after the completion of the second movable body initialization process. And the part that executes in order)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 210SG,
With the plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face-to-face initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control due to the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of, the first one is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the set state or the confirmation state has ended. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process based on the above is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is performed. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the end of
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Although the feature portion 207SG in this embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the like. Although the embodiment including the design display 207SG020, the general drawing hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state). Although an embodiment in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. It is possible to inform the existence in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on, thereby making the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. 1 Display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B as a display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays a variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state. If the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to light a part of all the segments constituting the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. Illustrated a mode in which all segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. For blinking of all segments to be performed, it may not be executed or only a part of the blinking may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and unless it is a combination corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited, and for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or a temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the embodiment for determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, but is limited to the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can be notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As a process, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. , Actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An embodiment has been exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator A description indicating that the 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are lit or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk or the like of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

[Explanation of feature units 005F and 006F]
The feature units 005F and 006F of this embodiment will be described. In the feature units 005F and 006F, a display monitor process for displaying the base value in the normal state (game state excluding the jackpot game state, the probability change state, and the time saving state) on the display monitor 207SG029 will be described. The feature unit 005F will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2. The feature unit 006F will be described with reference to FIG. 13 and the like.

In the feature unit 005F, a display monitor process including a process of determining a normal state based on a test flag used for generating a test signal will be described. In the feature unit 006F, a display monitor process including a process of determining a normal state based on a special figure process flag, a probability change flag, and a time saving flag will be described.

[Explanation of feature section 005F]
The feature unit 005F of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 005F, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029. Hereinafter, a method of calculating the base value and the like will be described.

FIG. 12-1 (A) is a diagram for explaining a method of calculating a base value, and FIG. 12-1 (B) is a diagram for explaining data update for each gaming state. The base value in the feature unit 005F of this embodiment is the total number of payout balls (prize balls) due to the winning of the game balls to each winning opening with respect to the number of game balls fired in the game area (number of shot balls, number of outs). Number) is the ratio. The base value includes a base value (normal state base) in a normal state (low probability low base state) and a base value (total base) in all gaming states.

Here, at the lower part on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the game ball that has won a prize in each winning port or the game ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided. ing. Inside the nozzle, a discharge port switch 005F070 (FIGS. 8-1, 8- 2) is provided. The switch circuit 110 takes in the detection signal from the outlet switch 005F070 and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. The number of launch balls (the number of outs) is counted based on the detection signal of the outlet switch 005F070. The number of launched balls may be measured as follows. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher is launched into the game area through the launch path on the launch rail, but a sensor is provided on the launch rail to measure the number of launch balls (out number) launched in the game area. It may be. For example, at that time, a sensor is installed on the launch rail to prevent the return ball so that the game ball launched in the game area can be measured (so as not to measure the foul ball). May be good.

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), the base value in the normal state (normal state base) is paid out in the normal state with respect to the number of game balls fired in the game area in the normal state (number of balls fired in the normal state). This is the ratio of the total number of prize balls (the number of prize balls in the normal state). In addition, the base value (total base) in all gaming states (all types of gaming states after the power is turned on) is the total gaming state with respect to the number of gaming balls (total number of launched balls) fired in the gaming area in all gaming states. This is the ratio of the total number of prize balls paid out in (total number of prize balls).

The CPU 103 executes the display monitor process in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. The base value is calculated for every 6000 out balls in all game states in the display monitor processing. As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (B) and 8-17 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value (real-time value during measurement) calculated in the normal state for each out 6000 balls in all game states. It is possible to display the base L, which is the base value, and the base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state for each of the first out 6000 balls in the all-game state.

The data of the number of normal state launch balls, the number of normal state prize balls, the total number of launch balls, and the total number of prize balls (hereinafter referred to as "display monitor data") used for calculating the base value are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Stored. As shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), these data are updated for each gaming state.

Specifically, the data of the total number of launched balls is updated by adding 1 each time the game ball is detected by the discharge port switch 005F070 (that is, each time it is launched into the game area) in the display monitor processing. , Stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Further, the data of the total number of prize balls is updated by adding the number of prize balls paid out each time the payout occurs due to the winning in the display monitor processing, and is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. That is, the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls will be updated even in the normal state and the gaming state other than the normal state (see FIG. 12-1 (B)).

On the other hand, the number of fired balls in the normal state is added by 1 each time the game ball is detected by the discharge port switch 005F070 in the normal state in the display monitor processing (that is, each time the game ball is launched into the game area), and the data is added. It is updated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Further, in the display monitor processing, the data of the number of prize balls in the normal state is updated by adding the number of prize balls paid out each time a payout occurs due to winning in the normal state, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. NS. That is, the number of balls launched in the normal state and the number of prize balls in the normal state are updated in the normal state, but are not updated in the gaming state other than the normal state (see FIG. 12-1 (B)).

Further, in the display monitor process, a data check process is performed to check whether or not inconsistencies have occurred in the updated various data (display monitor data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102) at the time of updating the data. In the data check process, it is determined whether or not the number of fired balls in the normal state and the total number of fired balls have a predetermined relationship. Then, when it is determined that the relationship is not predetermined, the RAM clear flag is set to ON. Then, based on the RAM clear flag being in the ON state, the information of the predetermined area stored in the RAM 102 is initialized.

Here, "there is no predetermined relationship" means that "the number of balls launched in the normal state exceeds the total number of balls launched". Since the total number of launched balls is data that is updated even in a state other than the normal state, the number of launched balls in the normal state cannot exceed the total number of launched balls. Therefore, when the number of fired balls in the normal state exceeds the total number of fired balls, the CPU 103 determines that some data abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the RAM 102, and executes the RAM clear process. ing.

When the RAM clear flag is turned on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process as follows. In the main side error processing (S22) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4, the RAM clear processing is executed when the RAM clear flag is in the ON state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the information of the predetermined area stored in the RAM 102 is initialized in the RAM clearing process.

Further, for example, when the RAM clear flag is turned ON, the CPU 103 may execute the RAM clear process as follows. In the command control process (S27), when the RAM clear flag is in the ON state, an effect control command capable of identifying a RAM abnormality is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the RAM is abnormal based on the command. Then, a clerk at the amusement park or the like may perform a predetermined operation (such as turning on the power again) to execute the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag.

Next, in the display monitor process, a process of determining whether or not the game state is a normal state will be described. In the feature unit 005F of this embodiment, a test flag is used when determining whether or not the gaming state is the normal state.

FIG. 12-2 is a diagram for explaining a process of determining whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the test flag. As shown in FIG. 12-2, in the display monitor processing, the normal state flag is set based on the test flag used for the test signal processing. Then, in the display monitor process, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state by using the normal state flag. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given.

In the feature unit 005F, the main board 11 is provided with a test connector (not shown) for monitoring various test signals transmitted on the main board 11 with an external test device. The CPU 103 executes a test signal output process for outputting various test signals to the test connector via the I / O 105. The test signal output process is a process executed in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. The test signal is a signal used for confirming the performance of the gaming machine, and is a signal that enables an external testing device in a testing institution to inspect the operation and state of the gaming machine (formal test).

In the test connector, the output signal corresponding to each pin of the signal output terminal is predetermined. For this reason, when testing a gaming machine, a plurality of test signals are collectively output to the outside by connecting a signal output cable provided with a connector corresponding to the test connector to the test connector. Can be done. This makes it possible to easily perform a formal test consisting of a compatibility test for launching a hit ball, a compatibility test for paying out a prize ball, and a compatibility test for an ordinary electric accessory (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B, etc.). can.

The test signal includes test signals A to G capable of identifying the gaming state. The test signal A is a signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The operation signal of the accessory continuous operation device is turned on during the period controlled by the jackpot game state.

The test signal B is a normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. The normal symbol 1 high-probability state signal is turned on while the probability that the display result in the normal figure game will be "per normal figure" is higher than the normal state.

The test signal C is a normal symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal. The normal symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned on while the normal symbol variation time is shortened from the normal state.

The test signal D is a special symbol 1 high probability state signal. The special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on while the probability that the display result in the first special symbol game will be a "big hit" is higher than the normal state. The test signal E is a special symbol 2 high probability state signal. The special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on while the probability that the display result in the second special symbol game will be a "big hit" is higher than the normal state.

The test signal F is a special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal. The special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned on during the state in which the special symbol variation time in the first special symbol game is shortened from the normal state. The test signal G is a special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal. The special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is turned on during the state in which the special symbol variation time in the second special symbol game is shortened from the normal state.

The test signals include signals other than the above A to F. For example, a launch ball signal due to the detection of the launch detection switch, a start winning signal due to the detection of the start port switch, and the like are included.

These test signals are generated based on the test flags stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The test flag is a dedicated flag used for generating a test signal in test signal processing. The test signals A to G are generated based on the test flags A to G, respectively.

For example, the test signal A (the signal during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory) is generated based on the test flag A (the flag during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory). The test flag A (flag for operating the accessory continuous operation device) is set to the ON state during the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the test signal processing. The test signal A is turned on when the test flag A is set to ON, and is turned off when the test flag A is set to OFF. That is, the test signal A (the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device) is turned on during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. The same applies to the test signals B to G.

As described above, the test flag is set based on various states such as the jackpot game state in the test signal processing, and is used to generate the test signal. Further, the test flag is also used in the display monitor process to determine whether or not the gaming state is the normal state.

Specifically, in the display monitor process, the normal state flag is set based on the test flags A to G stored in the RAM 102. The normal state flag is set to ON when none of the test flags A to G is in the ON state. Further, the normal state flag is set to OFF when any of the test flags A to G is turned ON.

In this embodiment, at least one or more of the test flags A to G is turned ON when any of the jackpot game state, the probability change state, and the time saving state. Therefore, when none of the test flags A to G is in the ON state, it can be determined that the test flag is in the normal state.

Next, in the display monitor processing, the normal state flag is used to determine whether or not the game state is the normal state, and the base is calculated. The calculation method is as described in FIG. 12-1.

As described above, in the display monitor processing, the normal state is specified based on the test flags A to G, which are the information used for generating the test signal capable of specifying the game state, and the normal state is normally compared to the number of fired balls in the normal state. The normal state base, which is the ratio of the number of state prize balls, is calculated, and the normal state base is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

Further, in the feature unit 005F, a specific instruction is not used in the test signal processing. Specifically, the specific instructions are a CALLV instruction, an RST instruction, and an LDQ instruction. Hereinafter, instructions including specific instructions will be described.

As described above, the CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. The program executed by the CPU 103 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and a subroutine that is called during the execution of another program. The above-mentioned specific instruction is included as a calling instruction for the CPU 103 to call and execute the program stored in the ROM 101.

The CALL instruction is an instruction that calls and executes a subroutine stored at an address specified in the main routine or the subroutine. When calling a subroutine by a CALL instruction, the CPU 103 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the specified address. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the main routine or the subroutine of the caller who executed the CALL instruction is returned.

Further, the CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. The normal CALL instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine by specifying both the upper address and the lower address and specifying the address by the specified upper address and lower address, whereas the CALLV instruction only uses the lower address. By specifying, it is an instruction to specify the address by the "preset upper address" and the specified lower address in the predetermined area (vector table area) of the ROM 101 and call the subroutine, which is compared with the normal CALL instruction. It is possible to call a subroutine with a small amount of data.

The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored in a specific address corresponding to a specified value by designating a value corresponding to "a plurality of predetermined specific addresses", and is usually executed as described above. It is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction or CALLV instruction of.

The LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored at the address specified in the main routine or the subroutine into the specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

Further, the LD instruction includes a normal LD instruction and an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. The normal LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored in the specific area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 by the specified upper address and the lower address by designating both the upper address and the lower address, whereas the LDQ instruction is an instruction. By specifying only the lower address, the address is specified by the "preset upper address" and the specified lower address in the special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 102, and the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 It is an instruction to read the data stored in a specific area and store the read data in a specified register, and it is possible to store a predetermined data in a predetermined register with a smaller amount of data than a normal LD instruction. It will be possible.

Here, the program executed by the CPU 103 includes a program related to the progress of the game and a program not related to the progress of the game. The program related to the progress of the game is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game (affects the result of the game) unless the process based on the program is executed. The program related to the progress of the game is stored in the game program area (for example, 0000H ~) of the ROM 101, and is also referred to as an “intra-area program”.

The program related to the progress of the game includes a program that executes a special symbol process process and a normal symbol process process that are executed in the game control timer interrupt process. The data used for the program related to the progress of the game is stored in the game RAM area (for example, F000H ~) of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, a program that is not related to the progress of the game is to execute a process that does not hinder the progress of the game (does not affect the result of the game) even if the process based on the program is not executed. Program. The program not related to the progress of the game is stored in a non-game program area (for example, 2000H or more) different from the game program area of the ROM 101, and is also referred to as an "out-of-area program". Programs that are not involved in the progress of the game include programs that execute test signal processing and display monitor processing. For example, the test signal processing is a process for outputting a test signal for a type test, and even if the process is not executed, the progress of the game is not hindered. The data used for the program not related to the progress of the game is stored in the non-game RAM area (for example, F300H ~) different from the game RAM area of the RAM 102.

Some programs related to the progress of the game are frequently used, and unlike simple programs, they perform complicated arithmetic processing that adds data to each other, which is not present in normal program instructions. There is. Therefore, the program capacity is compressed by making such a process into a subroutine. Then, these subroutines are called and used by various instructions such as the CALLV instruction.

Of the programs related to the progress of the game, the frequently used subroutines are stored in the game RAM area (0000H to 0000H) of the ROM 101 where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). A specific value is set for the "upper address" in the above-mentioned CALLV instruction. Further, in the area of the "specific address" in the RST instruction, the start address in the storage address of the subroutine of the program related to the progress of the game is stored. Further, among the data stored in the RAM 102 and used for the program related to the progress of the game, the frequently used data is set in the area of the game RAM area (F000H to) where the start address is a specific value (for example, F0H). While storing, the specific value is set in the Q register as the "upper address" of the game data.

As described above, by setting the address, the CALLV instruction, the RST instruction, and the LDQ instruction, which are specific instructions, are used in the program related to the progress of the game. By doing so, it is possible to call the subroutine of the program related to the progress of the game with a small amount of data, and it is possible to read the game data used for the program with a small amount of data and store it in a predetermined register.

On the other hand, in the program that executes the test signal processing and is not related to the progress of the game, the specific instruction is not used for the following reasons. For example, when the CALLV instruction is taken as an example, as described above, the "upper address" in the CALLV instruction is a specific value (for example, "00") indicating a certain area in the game program area (0000H to). ) Is set. On the other hand, the program that executes the test signal processing is stored in the non-game program area (2000H ~), which is an area different from the game program area. In this way, since the stored areas are different between the two, when trying to execute the CALLV instruction in the test signal processing, it is necessary to change the specific value (for example, the specific value "00" is changed to "20". change).

Then, after that, when an attempt is made to execute the CALLV instruction in the program related to the progress of the game, a process of returning the specific value to the original value is required (for example, the specific value "20" is returned to "00"). However, even though the program subroutine is called with a small amount of data by the CALLV instruction, if the process of changing a specific value and returning it to the original value is performed in this way, the program capacity is unnecessarily increased. On the contrary, it puts pressure on the program capacity. In addition, in the unlikely event that the process of changing a specific value and restoring it fails, it becomes impossible to execute the subroutines that are frequently used among the programs related to the progress of the game, and the game There can be serious obstacles to progress.

The same applies when the LDQ instruction is used in test signal processing. A specific value (for example, "F0") indicating a certain area in the game RAM area (F000H to) is set in the "upper address" in the LDQ instruction. On the other hand, the data used in the program that executes the test signal processing (the program that is not related to the progress of the game) is stored in the non-game RAM area (for example, F300H ~), which is an area different from the game RAM area. There is. Therefore, when executing the LDQ instruction in the test signal processing, it is necessary to change the specific value and then restore it (for example, change the specific value "F0" to "F3" and further change "F3". Return to "F0"). By executing such a process, the program capacity is squeezed as described above, and if the process fails, a serious obstacle may occur in the progress of the game.

As explained above, by not using a specific instruction in the test signal processing that is not related to the progress of the game, the program capacity is not overwhelmed, and a serious obstacle may occur in the progress of the game. Sex can be avoided. As a result, the program can be executed stably.

The following effects can be obtained by the display monitor processing shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2.

(1) As shown in FIG. 12-2, in the display monitor processing, the normal state is specified based on the test flags A to G, which are the information used for generating the test signal capable of specifying the game state. , The normal state base, which is the ratio of the number of normal state prize balls to the number of normal state fired balls, is calculated, and the normal state base is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029. Thereby, the normal state base can be displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 by using the test flags A to G used for generating the test signal for specifying the normal state.

(2) As shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), in the display monitor processing, the number of balls fired in the normal state in the normal state and the total number of balls fired in the game area in all the game states. The number and the number are updated, and when the game state is not the normal state, the total number of fired balls is updated while the number of fired balls in the normal state is not updated. By doing so, the total number of fired balls for calculating the base (total base) in all game states and the number of normal state fired balls for calculating the base (normal state base) in the normal state can be accurately calculated. Since it can be calculated, it is possible to accurately calculate the base for each gaming state.

(3) As shown in FIG. 12-2, when the test signal is generated in the test signal processing, the specific instruction (CALLV instruction, RST instruction, LDQ instruction) is not executed, so that the program is stably executed. be able to.

(Modification example of feature unit 005F)
Although the feature portion 005F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes or additions within the range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will have. included. A modified example of the feature unit 005F will be described below.

(1) The base value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is not limited to the bases L, 1 to 3 (see FIG. 8-17 (C)) calculated for each out 6000 balls, but is calculated for each out 60000 balls. It may be. Further, the base values are not limited to the bases L and 1 to 3 which are the base values in the normal state, and the base values in all the gaming states may be displayed on the display monitor 207SG029. Further, the display monitor 207SG029 may display the base value in various game states such as the big hit game state, the time saving state, and the probability change state.

(2) Further, the normal state base displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 displays the calculated numerical value (the ratio of the number of normal state prize balls to the number of normal state launch balls) as it is, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be the data obtained by processing the calculated normal state base. For example, when it is less than 5%, it is displayed as A, when it is 25% or more and less than 50%, it is displayed as B, when it is 50% or more and less than 75%, it is displayed as C, and when it is 75% or more. May be displayed as D.

(3) As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the display monitor processing, the number of launching balls in the normal state is compared with the total number of launching balls, and when the number of launching balls in the normal state exceeds the total number of launching balls, the RAM The clear flag is set to ON. However, the method for determining that a data abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the RAM 102 is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the number of prize balls in the normal state is compared with the total number of prize balls, and if the number of prize balls in the normal state exceeds the total number of prize balls, the RAM clear flag is set to ON to initialize the predetermined area of the RAM 102. You may try to do it.

(4) Further, when executing the RAM clear process, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), it is not limited to the one that clears the contents of the address excluding the set value and the RAM clear flag, but is used for the display monitor. It may clear only the area where the data is stored.

(5) As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the display monitor processing, the normal state flag is set based on the test flags A to G stored in the RAM 102. However, instead of the test flag A (signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device), the big hit game state is determined by the special symbol 1 hit flag (special symbol 1 hit signal) and the special symbol 2 hit flag (special symbol 2 hit signal). It may be specified. The special symbol 1 hit signal is turned on during the control to the jackpot game state based on the first special symbol game. The special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on during the control to the jackpot game state based on the second special symbol game. Specifically, the normal state flag may be set to ON when none of the special symbol 1 hit flag, the special symbol 2 hit flag, and the test flags B to G is in the ON state.

(6) Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and any signal flag that can identify the normal state may be used. Further, any data or flag used in the process executed by the CPU 103 may be used as long as the normal state can be specified.

(7) The game machine 1 described above includes a plurality of variable display units capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each, and after variable display of the variable display unit, the variable display of the variable display unit is stopped. This may be a slot machine capable of deriving a display result and generating a prize according to a display result combination which is a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units.

[Explanation of feature unit 006F]
The feature unit 006F of this embodiment will be described. Similarly to the feature unit 005F, the feature unit 006F also calculates the base value and displays it on the display monitor 207SG029. Since the method of calculating the base value is the same as the description using FIG. 12-1, the description is omitted here. Further, the matters described in the modified example regarding the feature unit 005F can also be applied to the feature unit 006F.

As described with reference to FIG. 12-1 (B), the data update method of the data used for calculating the base value differs depending on whether or not the gaming state is the normal state. In the feature unit 005F, the test flag was used when determining whether or not the gaming state is in the normal state, but in the feature unit 006F, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the normal state. At that time, the above-mentioned special figure process flag and the like are used.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process of determining whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the special figure process flag or the like. As shown in FIG. 13, in the display monitor process, the normal state flag is set based on the special figure process flag, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag. Then, in the display monitor processing, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the normal state flag.

The special figure process flag is a flag indicating the progress of the game, and is a flag used in each process of the special symbol process process (S25). The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game based on the special figure process flag. When controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "5" to "7".

The time saving flag is a flag set to ON during the time saving state. Further, the probability change flag is a flag set to ON during the probability change state. It is determined whether or not the time saving flag and the probability change flag are set to ON in the jackpot end processing (S117), and whether or not to be set to OFF in the special symbol stop processing (S113).

The normal state flag is set to the ON state when the value of the special figure process flag is not "4" to "7" and neither the time saving flag nor the probability change flag is in the ON state.

The normal state (low probability low base state) is a jackpot game state (value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7"), a probability change state (probability change flag is ON state), and a time reduction state (time reduction state is ON state). ) Is excluded. Therefore, when the value of the special figure process flag is not "4" to "7" and neither the time saving flag nor the probability change flag is in the ON state, it can be determined that the state is the normal state.

Next, in the display monitor processing, the normal state flag is used to determine whether or not the game state is the normal state, and the base is calculated. The calculation method is as described in FIG. 12-1.

In this way, in the display monitor processing, the normal state is specified by using the special figure process flag indicating the progress of the game, and the normal state base, which is the ratio of the number of normal state prize balls to the number of normal state launch balls, is calculated. The normal state base is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

The following effects can be obtained by the display monitor processing shown in FIG.

(1) As shown in FIG. 13, in the display monitor processing, the normal state is specified by using the special figure process flag indicating the progress of the game, and the ratio of the number of normal state prize balls to the number of normal state launch balls. The normal state base is calculated, and the normal state base is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029. As a result, the normal state base can be displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 by using the special figure process flag indicating the progress of the game to identify the normal state.

(2) As shown in FIG. 13, it is determined accurately whether or not the game state is the normal state based on the special figure process flag, the time saving flag for determining the game state, and the probability change flag. It is possible to specify whether or not it is in a normal state.

(3) As shown in FIG. 12-2, when a test signal is generated in the test signal processing, which is an intra-regional program, the LDQ, call, restart instruction, etc., which are specific instructions used in the region, are used. Since it is not executed, the test signal processing can be completed as a program outside the region. As a result, the program can be executed stably.

(4) As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the display monitor processing, the number of normal state prize balls fired in the game area in the normal state and the total number of fired balls fired in the game area in all game states are calculated. At the same time as updating, it is determined whether or not the number of fired balls in the normal state does not exceed the total number of fired balls. Further, when the number of fired balls in the normal state exceeds the total number of fired balls, the RAM clear process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the erroneously calculated normal state base from being displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

(Modification example of feature unit 006F)
Although the feature portion 006F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes or additions within the range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will have. included. A modified example of the feature unit 006F will be described below.

(1) As shown in FIG. 13, in the display monitor processing, the normal state flag is set based on the special figure process flag, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag indicating the progress of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any data or flag used in the process executed by the CPU 103 may be used as long as the normal state can be specified.

For example, in order to generate data and flags (flags for generating test signals and effect control commands) that can identify the game state (right-handed state) in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. Data, etc.) may be used. In this case, a state other than the right-handed state may be determined as a normal state. The right-handed state is set to a high-accuracy low-base state (high-accuracy state and low-base state) when controlled to a jackpot game state or a time-saving state after a jackpot game state, or in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with the KT function described later. It is a state that is controlled when it is controlled.

In addition, data and flags for generating a door opening command for specifying the opening of the glass door frame 207SG003a and a game stop command for specifying a game stop state (error state, setting confirmation state, etc.) for stopping the progress of the game are used. You may. In the door open state or the game stopped state, the number of fired balls and the number of prize balls may not be counted, and such a state may be excluded to determine the normal state.

Here, some pachinko gaming machines are equipped with a KT function. KT is an abbreviation for small hit time. In the KT machine, the KT state is controlled to be more likely to be a small hit than the normal state when a predetermined condition is satisfied (controlled after a specific big hit, etc.). In the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by fluctuating the second special symbol, resulting in a gaming state (a state in which the number of balls is increased) that is advantageous to the player.

(2) As shown in FIG. 13, the normal state flag is set to ON when the value of the special figure process flag is not “4” to “7” and neither the time saving flag nor the probability change flag is in the ON state. I tried to be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to ON when the value of the special figure process flag is not "4" to "10" and neither the time saving flag nor the probability change flag is in the ON state (special figure). When the value of the process flag is "8" to "10", it is a small hit game state). By doing so, the display monitor 207SG029 can display the base value in the normal state excluding the small hit game state.

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 100 game control microcomputer, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation control means.
An ordinary variable display means that variably displays the ordinary identification information based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area and derives and displays the display result.
Ordinary variable display timekeeping means for measuring the ordinary variable display period, which performs variable display of ordinary identification information,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result, the normal variable means that allows the game medium to pass through the specific area, and the normal variable means.
The ordinary variable timekeeping means that measures the passable period during which the ordinary variable means can pass, and the ordinary variable timekeeping means.
A special variable display means that can display the variable display result by variable display of the special identification information,
Special variable display timekeeping means for timing the special variable display period for variable display of special identification information,
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state has ended, and
A notification timing means for measuring the notification period in which the notification effect is executed is provided.
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state even when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing that can execute the processing related to the game is executed.
The interrupt process is executed when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the normal variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the passable period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state ends. The timekeeping of the passable period is interrupted until the time is completed, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timekeeping of the passable period is restarted.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the special variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted.
The setting confirmation state ends when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the notification period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state. The timing of the notification period is interrupted until, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timing of the notification period is restarted.
A gaming machine characterized by that. Movable movable objects and
A motion control means capable of controlling the motion of the movable object.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images